Canon | PowerShot A2200 | User guide | Canon PowerShot A2200 User guide

Canon PowerShot A2200 User guide
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ“ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ؛ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-8L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LA/CB-2LAE‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫‪WS-800‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪AVC-DC300‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DIGITAL CAMERA Manuals Disk‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺗﻘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Adobe Reader‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .PDF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Word/Word Viewer‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) Word‬ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ؛ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺯﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﻮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻗﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ -‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻛﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ؟‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪٢٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ( ‪٢٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻤﻨﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ‪٧٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ‪٧١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ‪٩٨ ،٦٨ ،٢٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪٥٦ . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‪٨٠ ،٦٢ ،٦٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻲ ‪٥٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ‪٢٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ( ‪٢٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ‪١١٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٢٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٣٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١١٥ ،١١٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٥ ،٢٨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪٣٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٣٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ‪١٣٨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٣٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪٥٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪١٥٥ ،٣٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٧١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺗﻚ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪٢ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪٣ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ؟‪٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٩ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪١٠ .....................................‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٣ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٤ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ( ‪١٦ ............‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪١٦ ......................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٩ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٢١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪٢٢ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪٢٣ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪٢٤ .................... (Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٧ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٨ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪٢٩ ..........‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪٣٠ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٣٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪٣٤ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪٣٨ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ‪٣٩ .................................‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ‪٤١ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ‪٤٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٤٦ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪٤٧ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ – FUNC.‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٤٨ .......‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ – MENU‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٤٩ .......‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٥٠ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٥٢ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪٥٣ ............‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٥٤ .........‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٥٤ ........................................‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ‪٥٥ ....................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٥٧ .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٥٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪٦٠ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) Pixel‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪٦٣ .........‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٦٣ ................‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪٦٧ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪٦٨ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪٧١ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪٧٢ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( ‪٧٢ ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪٧٧ .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ‪٨١ .....................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪٨٣ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٨٤ ............................AE‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٨٥ ...........‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٨٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٨٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٨٧ ....................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٨٨ ...........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٨٩ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪٩٠ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪٩١ .................... (Macro‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ )ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ( ‪٩١ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ ‪٩٢ .................................AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪٩٤ ...(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪٩٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٩٦ .......................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪٩٧ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ( ‪٩٨ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪٩٩ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٠ ....................... AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٠ ....................... FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء ‪١٠١ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪١٠٢ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪١٠٣ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‪١٠٣ ...‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٠٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٠٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻤﻨﻤﺎﺕ(‪١٠٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٠٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪/AE‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٠٩ ....................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪١١٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪١١١ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪١١٣ .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪١١٤ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪١١٥ ......‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪١١٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪١١٧ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١١٨ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪١١٩ .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٢٠ ................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٢ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪١٢٧ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻓﺌﺘﻲ(‪١٢٨ ..................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٣٠ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٣١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪١٣٢ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪١٣٤ ......................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪١٣٥ .......................‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٣٧ .............................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٣٨ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪١٤٥ ................. (DPOF‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٤٩ ........‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٥٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٥٧ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٦١ ....................‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‪١٦٣ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪١٦٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪١٦٥ ......................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٦٩ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٧١ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪١٧٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٧٦ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪١٨٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٩٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪١٩٨ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ] [ )ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ FUNC./SET‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC./SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ :(xx‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ )ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ”‪ “xx‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻻ ﺑﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ A3300 IS‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A3300‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ A3350 IS‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A3200 IS‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A3200 IS‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A2200‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A2200‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A3300 IS‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻬﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﱠﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺣﻤﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻏﺰﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ )ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪° ٤٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،A‬ﺛﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻟﻔﻪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪CB-2LA‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ‪ o‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) ( ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪ :CB-2LA‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪ :CB-2LAE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LAE‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) ( ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪Camera & Imaging Products‬‬
‫)‪.Association (CIPA‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ٍ‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫”ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪“.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨُ ِﻔﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.o‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤٠ – ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫)‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ؛ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺨﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDHC‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDXC‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪MultiMediaCard‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪MMCplus‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪HC MMCplus‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ .SD‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ SDXC‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﺘﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ً SDXC‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‬
‫( ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؟‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ 3830‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪ 1058‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪ 4334‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪ 1058‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪ 4334‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪ 935‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ؟‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) ON/OFF‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ( ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٣٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬
‫• ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٩‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ opqr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪m‬؟‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺒﻘﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﱠ‬
‫ﻓﺘﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥١‬ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ )ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﻮﺿﺎ ًء‬
‫ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) i‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) j‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪) .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‪...‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ؟‬
‫ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺹ ‪ (١٧٢‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) G‬ﺹ ‪.(٨٣‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻭﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻫﺪﻑ؟‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ؟‬
‫ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) G‬ﺹ ‪.(٨٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ؟‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﻇﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ؟‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺳﻢ – ‪ ٤٫٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ ،(j‬ﻭ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ – ‪ ٢٫٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪.(i‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺪﻓﻚ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ ٣ :(j‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪ ٩٠ :(i‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ، A3200 IS A3300 IS‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ‪. A2200‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﺃﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ h‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ؟‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؟‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ r‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ ،qr‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.p‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ؟[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻠﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.9‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٥ – ٣‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٢٥ – ٢٤‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ r‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ! ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪r‬‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ؛ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.E‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ j‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ٍ ٥‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﻮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 4‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪. m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ؟‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱢﺩ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﱠ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪Windows 7‬‬
‫‪ Windows Vista Service Pack 1‬ﻭ‪Service Pack 2‬‬
‫‪Windows XP Service Pack 3‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ًَ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(CPU‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ ١,٣ Pentium‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭ‪ ١,٦٦ Core2 Duo‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪(RAM‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Windows 7‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ(‪ ٢ :‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Windows 7‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺖ( ﻭ‪) Windows Vista‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ ﻭ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺖ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٥١٢ :Windows XP‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫)ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠ :ZoomBrowser EX‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠ :CameraWindow‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ ٣٠ :Movie Uploader for YouTube‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٤٠ :PhotoStitch‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ ٧٦٨ x ١،٠٢٤‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ )ﺑﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪Mac OS X (v10.5 – v10.6‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ًَ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(CPU‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪) Intel‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ ١,٦٦ Core Duo‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪(RAM‬‬
‫‪ ١ :Mac OS X v10.6‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٥١٢ :Mac OS X v10.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٢٥٠ :ImageBrowser‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠ :CameraWindow‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ ٣٠ :Movie Uploader for YouTube‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٥٠ :PhotoStitch‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪ ٧٦٨ x ١،٠٢٤‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ)‪ Mac OS X (v10.5‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ )ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪) (CAMERA Solution Disk‬ﺹ ‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ[ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ]‪/User Account Control‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ )ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪) (CAMERA Solution Disk‬ﺹ ‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Install‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ[ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٢‬ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪.[CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪/All Programs‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ]‪ [Canon Utilities‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﺛﻢ ]‪.[CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Dock‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon Camera using Canon‬‬
‫‪/CameraWindow‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪ ،[CameraWindow‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ NB-8L‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫‪WS-800‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪*AVC-DC400‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*CB-2LA/CB-2LAE‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪*AVC-DC300‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪*IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫* ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪Windows/Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LA/2LAE‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.NB-8L‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-8L‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ACK-DC60 AC‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﻘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ – ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ؛ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪High-Power Flash HF-DC1‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴًﺎ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﻌُﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪SELPHY‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻧﻔﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺤﻖ ﻟﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A3200 IS A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٢ ٣ ٤‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٢ ١٣‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) i :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ‪) j /‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥٧ ،٣٠ ،٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) k :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ‪) g /‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١١٨ ،١١٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) ON/OFF‬ﺹ ‪(١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٨٥ ،٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٧ ،٨٠ ،٦٢ ،٦١ ،٦٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ /‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) A/V OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٨ ،١٢٠ ،٣٦‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۲ ۳ ٤‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫‪۱۱ ۱۲ ۱۳‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) i :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ‪) j /‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥٧ ،٣٠ ،٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) k :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ‪) g /‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١١٨ ،١١٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) ON/OFF‬ﺹ ‪(١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٨٥ ،٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٧ ،٨٠ ،٦٢ ،٦١ ،٦٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ /‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) A/V OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٨ ،٣٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٥ ،٣٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻛﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(٨٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )ﺹ ‪.(٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Auto‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A3200 IS A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪٣ ٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٦ ٧‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٦ ٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٧٣ ،١٧١ ،٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) 0‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ( )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) 1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺹ ‪(١١٣ ،٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) l‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( )ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) n‬ﺹ ‪(٤٩‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) b‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( )ﺹ ‪/ (٨٥‬‬
‫‪) d‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ( )ﺹ ‪o / (١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪) e (Macro‬ﺹ ‪q / (٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) FUNC./SET m‬ﺹ ‪(٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) h‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ( )ﺹ ‪r / (١٠١ ،٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ( )ﺹ ‪/ (٦٢ ،٦١ ،٦٠‬‬
‫‪) a‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ( )ﺹ ‪p / (٢٨‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺹ ‪.١٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١١٧‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 4‬ﺹ ‪.(١٥٨‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٤٦‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٧٣‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ؛ ﻭﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪ (٤٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲء‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٣٦‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٨١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ - FUNC.‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٣ – ١٧٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪l‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ – MENU‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ .(1‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٣ – ١٨٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﺃﻭ ‪r‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ l‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻜﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪ .(٣٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.op‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ؟‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )ﺹ ‪] ،(٢٠‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ )ﺹ ‪] ،(٢١‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )ﺹ ‪] ،(١٢٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (١٥٥‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء[ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )ﺹ ‪.(٨٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪) K‬ﺹ ‪ (٦٨‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٤‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ .A‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٣ – ١٧٦‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.r‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ !‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ !‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ! ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ x٢٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪A3200 IS A3300 IS‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ x١٦‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ A2200‬ﻭﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٣‬ﻭﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪i‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ i‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥٦٠ – ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ )‪ ١٤٠ – ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ(‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٤٤٨ – ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ )‪ ١١٢ – ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ(‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ x١٫٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ x٢٫٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ x١٫٧‬ﺃﻭ ‪ x٢٫١‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪A2200 ، A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢٤ – ٤٤٫٨‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [1.6x‬ﻭ‪ ٢٨٠ – ٥٦٫٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪A3300 IS [2.0x‬‬
‫‪ ٢٣٨ – ٤٧٫٦‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [1.7x‬ﻭ‪ ٢٩٤ – ٥٨٫٨‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪A3200 IS [2.1x‬‬
‫‪ ١٩٠ – ٤٧٫٦‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [1.7x‬ﻭ‪ ٢٣٥ – ٥٨٫٨‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪A2200 [2.1x‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪ ،(i‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ؛ ﻓﺒﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺄﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪) DPOF‬ﺹ ‪ (١٤٥‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.p‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.ù‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،ù‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ ù‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.p‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.ò‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.ò‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ ò‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )‪ ٣٠ – ٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )‪ ١٠ – ١‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.$‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،$‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ $‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦١‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ؟‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) Pixel‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.pixel‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ، m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪.٢ – ١‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٥٧‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺩﻗﻴﻖ(‪،‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ، m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪.٢ – ١‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪Pixels‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫)ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪16M/4608x3456‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪8M/3264x2448‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪2M/1600x1200‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫‪4608x2592‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٤،٠٩٣‬‬
‫‪935‬‬
‫‪3830‬‬
‫‪١،٩٥٦‬‬
‫‪1915‬‬
‫‪7844‬‬
‫‪٢،٠٦٠‬‬
‫‪1828‬‬
‫‪7487‬‬
‫‪٩٨٠‬‬
‫‪3771‬‬
‫‪15443‬‬
‫‪٥٥٨‬‬
‫‪6352‬‬
‫‪26010‬‬
‫‪٢٧٨‬‬
‫‪12069‬‬
‫‪49420‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪20116‬‬
‫‪82367‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪30174‬‬
‫‪123550‬‬
‫‪٣،٠٦٩‬‬
‫‪1243‬‬
‫‪5094‬‬
‫‪١،٤٦٧‬‬
‫‪2567‬‬
‫‪10514‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪Pixels‬‬
‫)ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪14M/4320x3240‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪(1‬‬
‫‪7M/3072x2304‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪(2‬‬
‫‪2M/1600x1200‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫‪4320x2432‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٣،٥٩٧‬‬
‫‪1058‬‬
‫‪4334‬‬
‫‪١،٧١٩‬‬
‫‪2194‬‬
‫‪8985‬‬
‫‪١،٨٩٧‬‬
‫‪1978‬‬
‫‪8101‬‬
‫‪٩٠٢‬‬
‫‪4022‬‬
‫‪16473‬‬
‫‪٥٥٨‬‬
‫‪6352‬‬
‫‪26010‬‬
‫‪٢٧٨‬‬
‫‪12069‬‬
‫‪49420‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪20116‬‬
‫‪82367‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪30174‬‬
‫‪123550‬‬
‫‪٢،٧٠٠‬‬
‫‪1403‬‬
‫‪5746‬‬
‫‪١،٢٩١‬‬
‫‪2873‬‬
‫‪11766‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫‪ ٥٩٤ x ٤٢٠) A2‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫‪x ٢٩٧) A3 – A5‬‬
‫‪ ٢١٠ x ١٤٨ – ٤٢٠‬ﻣﻢ( ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٠ x ١٣٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
4
٦٦
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.K‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.K‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫)ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﺝ( ‪A2200‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻃﻮﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ً‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ J‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﻋﺮﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ V‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ )ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻴﻔﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ )ﺷﺎﻃﺊ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻗﻮﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ )ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﱡ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،t‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪A3200 IS A3300 IS .(١٦٠‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ 2304 x 1728‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫)‪ 2144 x 1608‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ‪A2200 A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫)‪ 2144 x 1608‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ‪A2200‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،V‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪ (٨٧‬ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﺪﻟﺖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﻣًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ؛ ً‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻑ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٧٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻤﻨﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٧٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٧٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻓﺌﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٧٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ -‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺗﺒﺴﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦٨‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺴﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ؟‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﻤﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.op‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺴﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ًَ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦٨‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫]ﺍﻏﻤﺰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.p‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ؟‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.op‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻏﻤﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬًﺎ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ )ﺹ ‪ .(٩٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦٨‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ]ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻀﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬًﺎ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.p‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.op‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.É‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦٨‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.É‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.o‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٫٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٠‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ! ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
4
٨٢
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.G‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.AE‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪،G‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩١ – ١٧٦‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ ٥٫٠ :(j‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ -‬ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪ ٩٠ :(i‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ -‬ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ‪. A2200‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ A3200 IS‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.G‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.G‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺿﻚ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٠٣ – ٨٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ؟‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﱢ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٢+‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.o‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺳﻢ –‬
‫‪ ٤٫٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ ،(j‬ﻭ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ – ‪ ٢٫٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪.(i‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‪.h‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،r‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،h‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‪op‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ tungsten‬ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ‪(٣‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ )ﺫﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬
‫‪Fluorescent H‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻴﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺼﺤﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ @ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٤‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪، A3300 IS‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٠٫٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ A2200 A3200 IS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪.Drive‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،W‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ W‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٢ ،٦١ ،٦٠‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٦٩‬ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ A2200 (٦٨‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺯﺍﻩٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪/‬ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ l‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ٥٠ – ٣٫٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪.(j‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.e‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،e‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ e‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ؟‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ ò‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ‪ e‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ )ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻌُﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ ٣٫٠‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.u‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،u‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪) AF‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪.[AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪AiAF‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٩٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺨﻔﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪AF‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻐﻴﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٥٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.q‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺫﻱ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪.(٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .q‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٩٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ‪ e‬ﺃﻭ ‪.u‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪) [AiAF‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٩٢‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﱠﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻜﺒ ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ[ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٩٣‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﱠﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؟‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺒ ً‬
‫ﱠﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ ،[AiAF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ﱠﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺒ ً‬
‫ﱠﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٥٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺒ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٥٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٩٣‬ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٩٧‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٣‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.q‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ %‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ‪ ،%‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ً 4‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٢ ،٦١ ،٦٠‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.0‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،0‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ (AE‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ! )ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪o‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ &‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ &‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.AE‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) h‬ﺹ ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪o‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ (‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Í‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،r‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Í‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪A3200 IS A3300 IS .(١٦٠‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Ò‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﻖ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٤‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،r‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.$‬‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.W‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ“‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٢٠‬‬
‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
4
١٠٤
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻟﻘﺴﻤﻲ ”ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ“ ﻭ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ ،١‬ﻭﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.E‬‬
‫• ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.E‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻤﻨﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺃﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻤﻨﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ )ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ؛ ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ،Pixels‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ 1280 x 720‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ٍ ٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 640 x 480‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ً ٣٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ ١٧‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ ٥٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 320 x 240‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ً ٣٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺼﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﺘﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ ٥٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٢٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ ٤٧‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 4‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪/AE‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٢±‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‬
‫ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩١ – ١٧٦‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( )ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪) (Macro‬ﺹ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ )ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ( )ﺹ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(١٥٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٩‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪) IS‬ﺹ ‪(١٦٠‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ *‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ *‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ ،op‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ً‬
‫ﻃﺮﻗﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ (١٣٥ – ١٣١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.g‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.g‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.k‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ opqr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.o‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.qr‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.n‬‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 100‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻥ ‪.qr‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪[...‬‬
‫ﺑﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ ،qr‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٥٤‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻜﺒﱠﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ k‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 0‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ opqr‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.k‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٠x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،opqr‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ g‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫‪ m‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ opqr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (NTSC/PAL‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٥ ،٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٥١ ،٢٢‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٢٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٢٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﺘﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ]ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٢٥‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٢٥‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫( )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ )‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻓﺌﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪.V‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،9‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪.O‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،w‬ﺃﻭ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪.t‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻓﺌﺘﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﺌﺘﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻓﺌﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻔﺌﺘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ °٩٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦١‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٦٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﱠ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،opqr‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.0‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.١٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٦٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٣١‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﺬﺑﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻜﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.١٣١‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ؟‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ[ ﺃﻭ ٍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ opqr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.١٣١‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
4
١٣٦
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪) PictBridge‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ )ﺹ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺹ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٥ – ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٣٨‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺤﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪*2‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ ،[NR‬ﻭ]ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪*Vivid‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﺨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪*NR‬‬
‫‪*Vivid+NR‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [Vivid‬ﻭ]‪ [NR‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺤﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻧﻔﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ [1‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤٠‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ opqr‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٣٩‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤٠‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ( ‪ L‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤١‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٥ – ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٣٨‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (١٤٨‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪.(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎء ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺱ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫‪ ،3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) n‬ﺹ ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺱ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ُﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ ٩٩‬ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻧُﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨُﺴﺦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤٦‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤٦‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤٦‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪،(١٤٧ – ١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺿﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 3‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣُﻌﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣُﻌﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ )ﺹ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) FUNC.‬ﺹ ‪ (٤٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪) MENU‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٤٩‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﱠ‬
‫ﻓﺘﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٢‬؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻼ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣُﻌﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣُﻌﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣُﺴﺠﻠَﺔ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪. m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،9999‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢،٠٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪.9999‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 0001‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ ﻭ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ ،0001‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻳﻮﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٧‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٥٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﺇﻃﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ .(٥٤‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫]‪1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎء ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧١‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ[ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(١٩‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،G‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 4‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪ ،G‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩١ – ١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪ ،[AF-‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ 10 – 2‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ،AF‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﻮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ”ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ“ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪3:2‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٣:٢‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪.٣:٢‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪ [3:2‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳُﺴﻬﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻮﻳًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ[‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٣٠‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١١٩‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
4
١٦٢
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ﻭﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻖ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC ACK-DC60‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٦‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٧‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،ON/OFF‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲء‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﱡ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺿﻮء )ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪h‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) h‬ﺹ ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺹ ‪A3300 IS .(١٦٠‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻄﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ )‪ ،macro‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪.(٩٦ ،٩٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) h‬ﺹ ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٤ ،٨٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٠ ،٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ !‪) .‬ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٠ ،٩٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ! )ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ )ﺹ ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٧٠ ،٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٢‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٥٧‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‬
‫ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩١ – ١٧٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،9‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٢ ،٢٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﱢ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥١‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥١‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،9‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ o‬ﻭ‪ m‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SDHC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪ .“LOCK‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧ ،١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ!‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٥١‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء )ﺹ ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ (٨٣ ،٥٥ ،٣٠ ،٢٩ ،٢٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪– ١٣١‬‬
‫‪ .(١٣٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (١٢٥ ،٢٨‬ﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻲ! )ﺹ ‪(١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪RAW/AVI‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ!‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺌﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١١٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (١١٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (١٣٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (١٣٥ – ١٣١‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٢‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (١٢٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١١٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١١٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (١٣٥ – ١٣١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٤٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٢‬‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٤٧ ،١٢٩ ،١٢٦ ،١٢٣‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٦‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٦‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ‪ ٥٠١‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٢٢‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٢٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺌﺘﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪ ١،٠٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ؛ ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ!‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٣‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ(‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪١٢ ١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٩ ١٠‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٤ ٢٥ ٢٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ*‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫‪) Drive Mode‬ﺹ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )ﺹ ‪/ (٦٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) Pixels‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٨ ،٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠ ٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٢ ،٦١ ،٦٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ / (٥٧‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٩١‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AF‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٧٦‬ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠١ ،٨٥ ،٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺹ ‪(١٣٥‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺹ ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪،(١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) FE‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪) 3:2‬ﺹ ‪(١٥٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٠‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٣١‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٥‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻡ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﱠ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺁﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،A‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻓﺌﺘﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٨٥‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )ﺹ ‪/ (٦٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪،(١٠٨ ،٦٣‬‬
‫‪) MOV‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٥‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪٢٢ ٢٣‬‬
‫‪١٩ ٢٠ ٢١‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ –‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ‪ /‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٤ ،٨٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨ ،٦٤‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٥ – ١٣١‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٣٥ ،١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٩‬‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ* )ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(m‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ* )ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١١١‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺹ ‪.(١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪.qr‬‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴًﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﱢﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻕ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺴﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺒﻂء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪9 A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٢ ،٦١ ،٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٠١ ،٨٥ ،٥٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪ù‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪ò‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ *‪٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ *‪٣‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫!‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪ /(١٠٠‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) ٦* FE‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪/AE‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( )ﺹ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ]ﻏﺎﻣﻖ[ ﻭ]ﻓﺎﺗﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ٍ ٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Í‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Í‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ !‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪É‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪9 A‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪V J‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫‪) Drive Mode‬ﺹ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫*‪٧‬‬
‫*‪٧‬‬
‫*‪٨‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) pixels‬ﺹ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫)ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )ﺹ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪ ٧‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ٨* .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪É‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪9 A‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٢ ،٦١ ،٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٠١ ،٨٥ ،٥٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪ù‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪ò‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ *‪٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ *‪٣‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫!‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪ /(١٠٠‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) ٦* FE‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪/AE‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( )ﺹ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ]ﻏﺎﻣﻖ[ ﻭ]ﻓﺎﺗﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ٍ ٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Í‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Í‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ !‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪É‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪9 A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫‪) Drive Mode‬ﺹ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫*‪٧‬‬
‫*‪٧‬‬
‫*‪٨‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) pixels‬ﺹ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )ﺹ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪ ٧‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ٨* .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪É‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪9 A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪٣*(٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ‪) AF -‬ﺹ ‪(١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٥٧ ،١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪١* AiAF‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ *‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ *‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫– ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) o‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫‪1.7x/2.1x: A3200 IS ،1.6x/2.0x: A3300 IS‬‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻛﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪.A‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪É‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪9 A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ‪) IS‬ﺹ ‪(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺹ ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪3:2‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪É‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪9 A‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪٣*(٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ‪) AF -‬ﺹ ‪(١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٥٧ ،١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪١* AiAF‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪1.7x‬‬
‫‪2.1x‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ *‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫–‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) o‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻛﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪.A‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١٨٨‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪É‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪9 A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺹ ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪3:2‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪É‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫* ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ ٥‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ ٥‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻬﺮﻱ*‪/‬ﻳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ*‪ 0/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ 10 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 20‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ *1/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ*‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥١ ،٢٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪،١٥٤ ،٥٤‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ*‪/‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺖ*‪/‬ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫* ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٥‬‬
‫‪١٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪..................‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪ ١٤٫١‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪A3300 IS ........................................‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪) 5.0 :5x‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ‪ 25.0 -‬ﱠ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ﻣﻢ(‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪) ٢٨ :‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ‪ ١٤٠ -‬ﱠ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪) 5.0 :4x‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ‪ 20.0 -‬ﱠ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ﻣﻢ(‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪) ٢٨ :‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ‪ ١١٢ -‬ﱠ‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪A3300 IS ..........................................‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‬
‫‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪ ٩٠ ،‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﱠ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‬
‫‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪ ٨٠ ،‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﱠ‬
‫• ‪ ٥٠ - ٣ Macro‬ﺳﻢ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ................................‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪DIGIC 4 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ TFT ..................................................‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٧٫٥ A3300 IS ................................................‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﻪ(‬
‫‪ ٦٫٧ A3200 IS‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٢٫٧‬ﺑﻮﺻﻪ(‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪ ٦٫٨‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٢٫٧‬ﺑﻮﺻﻪ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ٢٣٠،٠٠٠ ...............................‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤:٣ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ...............................................‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )‪ ٥‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ...........................................‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ .............................................AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ ،AiAF‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪ ،AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ...............................................‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٢± ....................‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ٣/١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﺴﻨﺔ(‪ ......................‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ISO 80/100/200/400/800/1600 ،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ............................................‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪،Fluorescent H ،Fluorescent ،Tungsten ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﻼﻕ ‪ 1 – 1/1600 ...........................................‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 15 – 1/1600‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ(‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ..................................................‬ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪(ND‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪A3300 IS ....................................‬‬
‫‪) f/2.8 / f/8.0 A3200 IS‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪) f/5.9 / f/18 ،‬ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪) f/2.8 / f/8.0‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪) f/5.9 / f/17 ،‬ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‪ ................................................‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٣٠ ................................................‬ﺳﻢ – ‪ ٤‬ﻡ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪ ٥٠ ،‬ﺳﻢ – ‪ ٢‬ﻡ ﱠ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،P ...........................................‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪،١*SCN ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ *‪ ،٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ ، A2200‬ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ*‪ ٤‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﻲء‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻤﻨﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻤﻨﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺗﺒﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ .................................‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ 4.0x :‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪16x ،‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ..................................................‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪A3300 IS .....................................‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪(P‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪(P‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪(P‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٧‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪................................... (CIPA‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ...........................................‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،SD‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،SDHC‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،SDXC‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ،MultiMediaCard‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،MMCplus‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪HC MMCplus‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ ،Design rule for Camera File system ..............................................‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(١-١‬‬
‫‪١٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪Exif 2.3 (JPEG) ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MOV .................................................‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪H.264 :‬؛ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ PCM :‬ﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ((‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪A3300 IS ........................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،4608 x 3456 :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ،3264 x 2448 :١‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪:٢‬‬
‫‪ ،1600 x 1200‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،640 x 480 :‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪4608 x 2592 :‬‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 2304 x 1728‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،4320 x 3240 :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ،3072 x 2304 :١‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪:٢‬‬
‫‪ ،1600 x 1200‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،640 x 480 :‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪4320 x 2432 :‬‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 2144 x 1608‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪ً 30) 640 x 480 ،(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .................................................‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ً 30) 1280 x 720 :‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪(١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪ً 30) 320 x 240 ،(١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻤﻨﻤﺎﺕ‪٢*640 x 480 ،٢*1280 x 720 :‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪ً 29.97‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً 1.5 ،‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً 3 ،‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ً 6 :‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ً 30 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪Hi-Speed USB ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ )‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪PictBridge ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .............................................‬ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-8L‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ACK-DC60 AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪............................... (CIPA‬‬
‫‪A3300 IS‬‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪ ٢٣٫٩ x ٥٦٫٧ x ٩٥٫١‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٫٣ x ٥٦٫٧ x ٩٥٫١‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٫٦ x ٥٧٫٢ x ٩٣٫٢‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ً‬
‫‪A3200 IS‬‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪A3300 IS ........................... (CIPA‬‬
‫‪ ١٤٩‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪A2200‬‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪ ١١٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪١٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-8L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ......................................................‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ٣٫٦ ............................................‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ ٧٤٠ ......................................................‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ٣٠٠ ............................................‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٤٠ – ٠ ....................................‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ٥٫٩ x ٤٠٫٤ x ٣٥٫٤ ....................................................‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪ ١٧ .....................................................‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LA/2LAE‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪ ٢٤٠ – ١٠٠ ..............................................‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٢ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺕ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‪ ٠٫١ ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ( – ‪ ٠٫٠٧‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ )‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ ٤٫٢ ..............................................‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٠٫٦٥ ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ ................................................‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٤٠ – ٥ ....................................‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ٢٥٫٠ x ٨١٫٠ x ٥٦٫٠ .....................................................‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪ .....................................................‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ٦٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ )‪(CB-2LA‬‬
‫‪ ٦٣‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪ ،CB-2LAE‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﺮﺗﻬﺎ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪١٤٥ ....................................................... DPOF‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٤٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٨٤ ...................................................‬‬
‫‪) Macro‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ( ‪٩١ ........................................‬‬
‫‪ MultiMediaCard/MMCplus‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٨٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪١٣٨ ،٤٠ ...........................................PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪٩٨ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪١٦٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٦٩ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٩٢ ،٢٥ ...............................................AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻴﻔﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٦٩ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪٥٣ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٥٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٨١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪١١١ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪/Pixels‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪١٠٨ ....‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪١٠٦ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٣٢ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪٣٢ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٠ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٩٠ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٦٠ ،٥٦ ،٢٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٦٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٩٧ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪٢ ...DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪٣٥ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪٢ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ‪٣٤ ................‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٨٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٥٥ ،١٥٤ ،٥٤ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪١٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٥٥ ،١٥٤ ،٥٤ ..............................‬‬
‫‪١٩٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪١٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪٦٤ ،١٨ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪١٥١ ،٢٢ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٣٢ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٧٥ ............‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٧٣ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٣ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻤﻨﻤﺎﺕ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪١٠٦ ،٧٤ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪١٣٤ ،٨٨ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺴﻢ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٧٧ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪٩٤ ،٢٦ .................................................. AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪١٣٤ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪١٣٥ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪١٣١ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪١٣٢ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٧١ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪١٣٠ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪١٥٣ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٩٢ ،٢٥ ........................................AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٩٦ ..................................................AF‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪٩٥ .......................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪٩٨ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٩٧ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) Pixels‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪٦٣ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪١١٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪١٣٥ ،١٠٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٨٩ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٠٣ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٥٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪٦٤ ،١٨ ،١٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٧١ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٣٢ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪١٣١ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪١٠٣ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٥٧ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪٥٧ ،٣٠ ،٢٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪١٢٧ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪١٣٢ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ( ‪١٥١ ،٢٢ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪٨٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٨٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٥٥ ،١٥٤ ،٥٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪١٥٥ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ )ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ( ‪٧٠ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪١٢٢ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪١٧١ ،١٥٩ .........................................‬‬
‫‪٦٨ ............... A2200‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪٩٠ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٩ ،١٠٠ .........................................AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪٨٥ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٠ .................................................FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪١٠٩ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪١٥٩ ...................................................... 3:2‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ‪٤٢ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪١٣ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪١٦٩ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٣ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪٩٥ ................................................. AF‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٢١ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٧٣ ،١٧١ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU, FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٤٦ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻃﺊ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٦٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٢ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٥٨ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٥ ،٢٨ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪١٢٢ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٦٨ ............................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪١٦٤ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٣٨ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪٩٩ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪١٦٤ .............................................. AC‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪١١٥ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٢٠ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ‪١١٨ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ‪١٢٠ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪١١٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٢٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪١١٤ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪١١٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪١١٨ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ ‪١١٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪٢٧ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪١١٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪١١٩ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪١٧١ ،٨٧ .............................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪١٥٥ ،٣٩ ،١٥ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪٢٩ .................................‬‬
‫‪١٩٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٦٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٦٤ ،٦٣ ...............................(Pixels‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺌﺘﻲ ‪١٢٨ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪٥٦ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٨٥ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء‪١٠١ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٤٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٧٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪٢ ......... DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٩ ،١٠٠ ............................................... AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٧١ ،٩٦ ..................................................AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٧١ ،١٠٠ ................................................FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٩٣ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪٥٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٣ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪١٢٠ ،٢ ............................(AV‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪١٣٨ ،٣٦ ،٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪٩١ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٢١ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٠ .........................‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪٤٧ ،٤٥ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٥٨ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪١١٧ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٢ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٥ ،٢٨ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٥ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪١٥٧ ،٤٣ ،٤٢ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٦٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪٣٩ .........................................................‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ‪٦٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪٦٢ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٨٠ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪٦١ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٨ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٨٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٨ .............................‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪٩١ ..................................................‬‬
‫‪٩١ .................................................. Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) AUTO‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٤٤ ،٢٤ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪٨٩ ....................................................Drive‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪١٦٤ ،١٣٨ ،١٢٠ ،٣٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪) AiAF‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪٩٢ ................................. (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪٩٣ ........................................ (AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٥٤ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٥٩ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪٢٠ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪١٩ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪١٥٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﺒﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪CEL-SQ8XA2N0‬‬
‫‪© CANON INC. 2011‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising